B2100 ENGLISH B2100 ENGLISH B2100 User Guide . P/N : MMBB0160614 (1.0) . Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone. Retain it for future reference.
ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ GPRSﻭMMS ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞB2100 : ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ.
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ B2100ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ .ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ .ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ )(SAR ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ B2100ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ :ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ، ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ. • ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: • ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ، ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ،ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻣﺪﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. • ﺍﻋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ. • ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ( ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍً. • ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ .ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ • ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ .
B2100ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 12 .............................................................................. • ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 12 .................................................................... • ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ 13 ................................................................... ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 14 ............................................................................... • ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 14 .......................................
• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ 22 .......................................................................... • ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 22 ...................................................... ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 23 ................................................................. • ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 23 ............................................................................... • ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ 25 ....................................
B2100ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ • ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 46 .......................................................... (5-2 • ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ) GPRSﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 48 ........................................................ (6-2 ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 49 .......................................................................... (3 • ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 50 .................................................................... [1-×-3 • ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 50 .......................................................
• ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 73 ................................................................ (3-6 • ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 73 .................................................................... (4-6 ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 74 ................................................................. (7 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 77 • ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ..................................................................... (1-7 • ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .....................................
ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء /ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ # ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ 12 B2100
ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ / ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ / ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ 13 B2100 ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ: ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ /ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ( ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. • ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ( :ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ”. • ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ) ( :ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء /ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ. ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ٍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ.
ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ 16 B2100
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍً ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ/ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .GPRS ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ. ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﻳﻔﻴﺪﻙ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ 1ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM 1ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ. 2ﺃﺯﺡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ،ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ. 2ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM 1ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ. 2ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ 3ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 1ﺿﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ 2ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ. 3ﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ 4ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 1ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ، ﺃﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. 2ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ 5ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ: • ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺎً ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ . ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ. 2ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. 3ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ، 1ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ” “ +ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ. 2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. . 3ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[. 1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .
ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. 1ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 1-1ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ 2-1ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 4-1ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[. ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ .ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ،ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ .ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ“ .ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .
ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 8-1ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ SIM ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ SIMﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ .
ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 4-2ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ/ﺿﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ،ﺛﻢ 5-2ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ،ﺛﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ/ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. 6-2ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ .
ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺭﻣﺰﻱ PUKﻭ(PUK2 ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .[4-4-6 ﺭﻣﺰ 4) PINﺇﻟﻰ 8ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ( ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ) PINﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ .ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ PUKﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .
ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ 3ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ 1ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 1ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ 2ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ 3ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ 4ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ 5ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ 6ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ 7ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 8ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ 9ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ 2ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 1ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ 2ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ 3ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ 4ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ 5ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 6ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ GPRS 1ﻋﺎﻡ 2ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ 3ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ 4ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ 5ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ 4ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ 1ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ 6ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 1ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 2ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 3ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 4ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 7ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ 1ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ 2ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ 3ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 4ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ 5ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ 6ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ 7ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 8ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 8ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ 1ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 2ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ 3ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ 4ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ URL 5ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ 6ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ 7ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ 8ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ 9ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ 9ﺟﺎﻓﺎ 1ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 2ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ 3ﺍﻷﻭ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ) SMSﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ( ﻭMMS )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ،ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻬﺎ. ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. 1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 • ﻟﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. • ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ. • ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ T9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ )(T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC • ﻟﻐﺎﺕ T9 ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ .T9 • ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-2 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. 1ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 • ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ. • ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ T9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ )(T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC • ﻟﻐﺎﺕ T9 ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ .T9 • ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ 15ﻙ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ 15ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ T9 ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ T9ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ .ﻓﻲ ،T9ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. • ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ .T9 ﺇﻟﻰ 1ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ .ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ girlﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ،ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ :ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ :ﻓﺎﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(. ﺃﻭ :ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ .“T9 ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. ﻭ )ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺘﻚ 3ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-1 ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ. ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ] [ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ] [ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ] [ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ SIM ] [ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ ] [ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ” SIMﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ“ ،ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ SIMﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ“ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ .ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ :ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ] [ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ] [ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ] [ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ. * ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ،ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5-1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ. ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ] [ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ] [ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ] [ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[. ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6-1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ. ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [7-1 ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ .GSMﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ .ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8-1 ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-8-1 ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ 6ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ >ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ<. ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-8-1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً. • ﺣﻔﻆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ“ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 • ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-8-1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ .ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [9-1 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-9-1 • ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﺩﺍﺓ Natlﻭ X.400ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭERMES ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-9-1 • ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ :ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ،ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻗﺼﻮﻯ. • ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. • ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ. • ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ. ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-9-1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ. 1ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. 2ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1 ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5-9-1 ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ.
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-2 ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-2 ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-2 ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً .
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-5-2 ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ .ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ .PIN2 ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ.
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2 • ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ، ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ. • ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ] GPRSﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6-2 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ .
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3 ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ . ً 3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﻋﺎﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ. ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ً ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء. ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ.
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ. ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-×-3 ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-×-3 ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3 ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻘﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ. :ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺳﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ 5ﺛﻮﺍﻥ.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-1-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-1-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮﻡ /ﺷﻬﺮ /ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ /ﻳﻮﻡ /ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ /ﺷﻬﺮ /ﻳﻮﻡ .
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-2-4 ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-2-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ. ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4-2-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ] LCDﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5-2-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ، .
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-3-4 ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. • ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ. ً ﺍﻹﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ • ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻً.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ. ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ. ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ. ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ 5ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ. ﺇﻟﻐﺎءﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-3-4 )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ( • ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ. • ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4-3-4 )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( • ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ،ﻗﺒﻮﻝ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. • ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ،ﻗﺒﻮﻝ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3 ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [7-3-4 )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ )ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(. ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ :ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. :ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ CUGﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4-4 ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ] PINﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-4-4 ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ .PIN 1ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 3ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4-4-4 ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ .ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. • ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. • ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5-4-4 )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ (SIM ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ .PIN2 • ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. • ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. • ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6-4-4 PINﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4 ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-5-4 ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ .ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-5-4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-5 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ 5ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. 1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ :ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ~ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ~ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ. ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[. ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-5 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ .ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-2-5 ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ 39ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 20ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ. • ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ. • ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ 1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ. ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[. 3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-2-5 ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ .
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-5 1ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ. ﺑﺤﺚ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-3-5 )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[. 1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. 2ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-3-5 ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 200ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺣﻔﻆ 25ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. 2ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ .ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 • ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ 20ﻋﻀﻮﺍً. • ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻈﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4-3-5 ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ 3ﺛﻮﺍﻥ. 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً ]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 • ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ.• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ :ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ. -ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6-3-5 ﻟﻨﺴﺦ /ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8-3-5 • ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .(SIM 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ. 2ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ 4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6 ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،B2100ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ .ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ) (MMSﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6 .4ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ) .5ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ) .6ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ) .7ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ) ( /ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ) ( :ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ) (2+ ،1+ ،0 ،1- ،2- : ( :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ 3 ،ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 5 ،ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ( :ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ( /ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ) ( ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ،ﺗﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ” ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ. .
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6 “ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .4ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻗﻢ “ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ .ﻭﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ، “ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .33 ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-6 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ .
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6 .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ /ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. .3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ .ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6 ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-6 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ “ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ” ،ﺛﻢ “ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ” ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ “ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ” ﻭ”ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ” ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.ﻭﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً ﺃﻭﻻ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ .ﻭﻓﻲ “ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ” ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ .ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ[. • .ﺣﺬﻑ :ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [7 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-7 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 9ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ . ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ >ﻓﺎﺭﻍ< ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: :ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ :ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [7 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-7 ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ :÷ ،× ،- ،+ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ 1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ. 2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. 3ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ. ]ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [7 • ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ. • ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5-7 ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 4ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ: ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ. ]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[. 1ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ، 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ . 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ 4ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ .
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [7 ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-7-7 ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8-7 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ :ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ /ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ. ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻥ PC Syncﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .
ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8 ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ) .(WAPﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ .ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-8 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ. ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-8 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء.
ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ • GPRS ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ /ﺧﺪﻣﺔ. ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ : IPﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IPﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ WAPﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ WAPﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ. ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ :ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ (WAP :ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ (WAPﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ. :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .
ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8 ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ )ﺑﻼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ. HTTP ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. • ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ. • ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ • ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً. • ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ. ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ] URLﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [4-8 ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ URLﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [5-8 ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-5-8 ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-5-8 ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [6-8 ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8 ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [8-8 ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ. ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [9-8 ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: • ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-8 • ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [2-8 • ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ. • ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ URL ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﻣﺤﻮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [9 ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [1-9 ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. 1ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. 2ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ :ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ Java MIDP 3ﺣﻮﻝ :ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ MIDletﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. 4ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ :ﻳﺤﺬﻑ MIDletﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. 5ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ :ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ MIDlet 6ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ :ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ .
ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [9 ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ [3-9 ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ. JAVA TMﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﻚ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ. ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ .ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ .ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ. ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ. ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ B2100 : PCS 1900 /DCS 1800 / GSM 900 : ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ 55 + :ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ 10 - :ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ 89 B2100
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ GPRSﻭ MMS ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﺪﻝB2100 : ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﻗﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻝ.ﺟﯽ B2100ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )(SAR ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ B2100ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ :ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ،ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ. • ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ،ﻟﻄﻔﺎً: ً • ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ .
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺍی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. • ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ .ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻠﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ،ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ .
B2100ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ 12 .................................................................. • ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 12 ...................................................................... • ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 13 ............................................................................... ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ 14 ...................................................................................... • ﺷﺮﺡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ 14 .................................................
• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 22 ..................................................... ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ 23 .......................................................................... • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ 23 ......................................................................... • ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ 25 ............................................................ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ...............................................................................
B2100ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ • ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ] GPRSﻟﻴﺴﺖ 48 ......................................................... [٢-۶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ 49 ....................................................................... [٣ • ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ 50 ................................................................ [٣ -x-١ • ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ 50 .................................................................. [٣ -x-٢ • ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ 51 .................................................................
• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ 73 ..................................................................... [۶-٢ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ................................................................. [٧ • ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ...................................................................... [٧-١ • ﺑﺎﺯی ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ......................................................................... [٧-٢ • ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ................................................................ [٧-٣ • ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ................
ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ /ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ /ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ B2100ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 12
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ /ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی B2100ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 13
ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺷﺮﺡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ /ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ • ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ( :ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ.
ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ~ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ. ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ • ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ . • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ . ﺗﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ /ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ .
ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ: ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ B2100ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 16
ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ. ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ /ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ GPRSﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ. ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ١ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ١ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٢ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ٢ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ١ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٢ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ٣ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ١ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ٢ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ”ﮐﻠﻴﮏ“ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ. ٣ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ۴ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. ١ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ٢ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻬﺮی ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ) .ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ۵ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ،ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ،ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. • ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ٬ • ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ١ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ٬ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ٢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ٣ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ .ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ » «+ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ١ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ. ٢ﻛﺪ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ،ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ١ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ١-١ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ]ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ١-٢ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .
ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ١-۴ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ )ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﺪ ،ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ]ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ،ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﻳﻚ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ۴-٣-۴ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ٢ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ .ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ .
ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ٢-۴ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ،ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ/ ٢-۵ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ،ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ /ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﻭ ٢-۶ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ .ﮐﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﻛﺪﻫﺎی PUKﻭ (PUK2ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]ﻣﻨﻮ [۴-۴-۶ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ. PINﻛﺪ ) ٨ﺗﺎ ۴ﺭﻗﻤﯽ( PINﻛﺪ )ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ( ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ً ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺭﺩ .
ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ٣ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ١ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ١ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ٢ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ٣ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ۴ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ۵ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲﻫﺎ ۶ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ٧ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ٨ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎ ٩ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ٢ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ١ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ٢ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ٣ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ۴ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ۵ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ۶ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ GPRS ١ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ٢ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ٣ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ۴ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ۵ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ۴ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ١ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ٢ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔ
ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ۶ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ١ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ٢ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ٣ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ۴ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ٧ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ١ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ٢ﺑﺎﺯی ٣ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ۴ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ۵ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ۶ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ٧ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ٨ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ٨ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ١ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ٢ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ٣ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ۴ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ URL ۵ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ۶ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﻛﯽﻫﺎ ٧ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ٨ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ٩ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ٩ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ١ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ٢ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ٣ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ١٠ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛ
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ) SMSﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ(MMS ، )ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ( ،ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-١ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ،ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ١ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ٢ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٣ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ T9 ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ .
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ • ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. • ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ. • ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ T9 ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮﻳﯽ ) (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABCﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی T9ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ .ﺣﺠﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ . ١ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ٢ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٣ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻛﻪ ً ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ۴ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ،ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ،ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ،ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ • ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ T9 ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )T9Abc/ (T9abc/T9ABC • ﺯﺑﺎﻥ T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی T9ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ • ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ١۵Kﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ،ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ١۵ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﺸﺪ .
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ T9 T9ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ T9ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ T9 ﺗﺎ ١ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ٢ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ: ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ. ﺣﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ :ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻴﻮﻩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ٬ﻣﻨﻮی ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ T9ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٣ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ ،ﺁﮔﺎﻫﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ،ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ .ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ( ،ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ،ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ] [ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ] [ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ] [ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ] [ SMSﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ * ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ،ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(، ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ،ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ،ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ،ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-۵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺖﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ /ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ] [ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ] [ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ] [ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ[. ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-۶ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ. ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٧ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ GSMﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ،ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ،ﺗﺎﻛﺴﯽ، ﺩﺍﺭﻭﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻬﺎﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ .ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٨ ﻣﺘﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٨-١ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ۶ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ Emptyﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٨-٢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ. • ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ • ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ. ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٨-٣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻧﺎﻡ ،ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ،ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻜﺲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٩-١ • ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ،ﺻﺪﺍ ،ﭘﻴﺠﻴﻨﮓ ،ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞERMES، X.400 ، ً ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ،ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٩-٢ • ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ :ﻛﻢ ،ﻋﺎﺩی ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ. • ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎیﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ،ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ. • ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ. • ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ :ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٩-٣ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ،ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻭﻗﺘﯽﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ١ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ٢ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ.
ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [١-٩-۵ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ.
ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢-١ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢-٢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢-٣ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ.
ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢ ۵ﻣﻨﻮی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ :ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ، ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ،ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻠﯽ. ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢-۵-٢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ PIN2ﻛﺪ )ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ( ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ١ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﻳﺎ ٢ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٢ • ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ،ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. • ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٣ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ،ﺯﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ١ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ٢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ. ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺷﻠﻮﻏﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ،ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٣ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ • ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﻛﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ ،ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٣ -x-١ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٣ -x-٢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ،ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٣ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺻﺪﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. :ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. • ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ • ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ۵ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ :ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ۵ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ١ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ٢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-١ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-١-١ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-١-٢ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ DD/MM/YYYY، MM/DD/YYYY، YYYY/MM/DD )ﺳﺎﻝ / Y:ﻣﺎﻩ / M:ﺭﻭﺯ (D:ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ • ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺷﺎﻣﺪ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٢-٢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٢-٣ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ On path modeﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ. ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٢-۴ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٣ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٣-١ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ،ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﻓﻜﺲ، ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ. • ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. • ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. • ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﺯﻳﺮﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻓﻌﺎﻝﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻜﺲﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ۵ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ. ﻟﻐﻮﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ.. ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٣-٣ )ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ( • ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. • ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. • ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-٣-٧ )ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ( ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ. ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ :ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ CUGﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ. :ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ CUGﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ :ﻧﺎﻡ CUGﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ CUGﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-۴-٢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ .ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ. ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-۴-٣ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ١٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ • ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺯی ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺯی. • ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ: • ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ. • ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺴﺦ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ. • ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-۴-۶ ) PINﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ . ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ PIN2 :ﻛﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ. ١ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ/ﭘﻴﻦ /ﭘﻴﻦ ٢ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ٬ﻛﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ] [OKﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ٢ﻛﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ /ﭘﻴﻦ /ﭘﻴﻦ ٢ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ] GPRSﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-۶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ GPRSﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۴-۶-١ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ GPRSﺛﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ WAPﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ PCﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺑﻨﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ GPRSﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-١ ﺗﺎ ۵ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ١ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ً ٢ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ، ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ،ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ،ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ. ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ٣ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ۴ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٢ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٢-١ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ٣٩ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ) ٢١ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﻨﯽ( ﻭ ﺗﺎ ٢٠ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. • ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ،ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ،ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ،ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. • ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ١ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٢ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ٣ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٢-٢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٣ ]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ١ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ٢ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٣-١ )ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ( ]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ١ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ٢ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ٣ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ۴ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٣-٢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ٢٠٠ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺎ ٢۵ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ١ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ[ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٢ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ • ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﻀﺎ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻫﺮ ﻋﻀﻮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ٢٠ﻋﻀﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ. • ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻀﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﻭﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭی ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ. • ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٣-۴ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ٣-٢ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.• ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ.• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ :ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻢﺩﻫﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[۵ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۵-٣-٧ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ. ]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ١ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ٢ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ]ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ B2100ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ) MMSﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی( ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ • ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶-١ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶ ۴ ۵ ۶ ٧ ( /ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺗﻴﺮﻩ) ( :ﺭﻧﮓ) ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ) ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ) (-2، -1 ،0 ،+1 ،+2 : ( :ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ 3 ،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ 5،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ) ( :ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ) ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ: ( /ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺳﻔﻴﺪ) ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ “ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ” ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﺎی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ١ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﭼﭗ /ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶ “ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ۴ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ” ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ” ، ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. “ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ” ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶ ١ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﭼﭗ /ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ٢ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ/ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ٣ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [۶-٣ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ← ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ.ﻏﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ،ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﻠﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ،ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧-١ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ٩ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﻓﻮﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ )ﺧﺎﻟﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ .ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ: ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ :ﻣﻨﻮی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ. :ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ :ﻣﻨﻮی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ :ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧-٣ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ۴ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ : ÷ ،x ،- ،+ﺟﻤﻊ ،ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ،ﺿﺮﺏ، ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ: ١ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‘ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ٢ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ٣ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ]ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ[ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ. ۴ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ۵ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧ • ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧-۵ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :ﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ]ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ[ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ١ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻭ ٢ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎی ﻭ ٣ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .
ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧-٧-٢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٧-٨ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ/ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ،ﺑﻪ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[٨ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ) (WAPﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ :ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ،ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-١ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ .ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .
ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[٨ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-٣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ۵ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ • ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ WAPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺣﺎﻣﻞﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ /ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[٨ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ GPRSﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ) (GPRSﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ. :ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ) (IPﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺯﻩ WAPﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺁﺩﺭﺱ IP (APN) :ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ GPRSﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. APN :ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ APN ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ :ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ.
ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[٨ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ] URLﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-۴ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ،ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-۵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-۵-١ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-۵-٢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[٨ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-٨ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ. ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-٩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ WAPﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ: • ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-١ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ • ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. • ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٨-٢ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ. • ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. • ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ URL ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. • ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٩-١ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. :ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ١ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ٢ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ :ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. :ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ MIDPﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. ٣ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ :ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ MIDIetﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. ۴ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ MIDIet :ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ. ۵ﺣﺬﻑ ۶ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ :ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ MIDIetﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[٨ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ [٩-٣ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﺍی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺎﺯیﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ۵ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎی wapﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎی wapﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. JAVA TMﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی Javaﺍﺳﺖ .
ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ )ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ( ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ CD / ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ،ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ.
ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ٬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎی SIM ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻫﺎﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ SIM ﻫﻴﭻ SIMﻛﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ B2100 : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 : ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ +55 :ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ -10 :ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ B2100ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ 89
ENGLISH GPRS & MMS Phone USER’S MANUAL MODEL: B2100 Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone. Retain it for future reference.
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact B2100 cellular phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressively approved in this user’s guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model B2100 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirement for exposure to radio waves.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Product care and maintenance Warning: Use only batteries, charger and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. (Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.) • Keep away from electrical appliances such as a TV, radio or personal computer.
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Efficient phone operation To enjoy optimum performance with minimum power consumption please: • Hold the phone upright as you speak to any other telephone. While speaking directly into the microphone, angle the antenna in a direction up and over your shoulder. • If your mobile phone supports infrared, never direct the infrared ray at anyone’s eye. Electronic devices All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Use a handsfree kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making and answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electonic system in your motor vehicle such as car stereo, safety equipment.
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of children’s reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard. Emergency calls Emergency call may not be available under all cellular networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging.
B2100 User Guide C o n t e n t s Overview Parts of the Phone .................................................................. 12 • Front view ............................................................................................. 12 • Rear view .............................................................................................. 13 Key Description ....................................................................... 14 • Keypad Description .......................................
• Making a call using the Phonebook ...................................................... 22 Additional Functions In call Menu ............................................................................. 23 • During a call .......................................................................................... 23 • Multiparty or Conference Calls ............................................................. 25 Access Codes .........................................................................
B2100 User Guide C o n t e n t s Profiles [Menu 3] ..................................................................... 53 • Activate [Menu 3-x-1] ............................................................................. 54 • Personalise [Menu 3-x-2] ....................................................................... 54 • Rename [Menu 3-x-3] ............................................................................ 55 Settings [Menu 4] ...................................................
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] ............................................................. 80 • Favorites [Menu 7-1] ............................................................................. 80 • Games [Menu 7-2] ................................................................................ 80 • Calculator [Menu 7-3] ........................................................................... 81 • My folder [Menu 7-4] .............................................................................
Parts of the Phone Front view Earpiece Display Screen Headset jack Side camera key Favorites key Message key Soft Left key Soft Right key Camera hot key Send key End/Power key Clear/Cancel key Phone book list key Numeric keys Hash key Star key Microphone B2100 User Guide 12
Parts of the Phone Rear view Camera lens Mirror SIM Card Socket Battery Terminals Battery cover Battery B2100 User Guide 13 Cable Connector/ Battery Charging Connector/ Hands-Free Car kit Connector
Key Description The following shows key components of the phone. Keypad Description Key Description Soft Left Key / Soft Right Key Each of these keys performs the function indicated by the text on the display immediately above it. Navigation Keys Use to scroll through menus and move the cursor. You can also use these keys for quick access to the following functions. • Up navigation key ( Favorites menu. ) : A shortcut key to the • Down navigation key ( Phonebook. • Left navigation key ( Camera menu.
Key Description ~ Key Description Numeric Keys These keys are used mainly to dial in standby mode and enter numbers or characters in editing mode. When you press these keys for a long time. • Used to call your voicemail box by • Used to call for international call by • Used to call Speed dials by from . . to . END/PWR Key Used to end or reject a call. This key is also used as Power Key by pressing this key for a few seconds. You can delete the characters, go back to the menu.
Key Description Letter Keys Each key can be used for several symbols. These are shown below. Key Description .
Display Information The screen displays several icons. These are described below. On-Screen Icons Icon/Indicator Description Tells you the strength of the network signal. Call is connected. You can use GPRS service. Shows that you are using a roaming service. The alarm has been set and is on. Tells you the status of the battery. You have received a text message. You have received a voice message. You have received a push message. You can view your schedule. All audible signals are turned off.
Installation 1. Inserting the SIM Card Locate the SIM card socket in the back of the phone. Follow the steps below to install the SIM card. 1. Remove the battery if attached. 2. Slide the SIM card into the slot, under the silvery holders, with the golden connectors facing down. 2. Removing the SIM Card Follow the steps below to Remove the SIM card. 1. Remove the battery if attached. 2. Take out the SIM card from the slot.
Installation 3. Installing the Battery 1. Position the lugs on the bottom of the battery into the retaining holder. 2. Then push to the half of the battery into position. 3. Lay the battery cover in place of the phone and slide it until the latch clicks.
Installation 4. Charging the Battery To connect the travel adapter to the phone, you must have installed the battery. 1. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the bottom of the phone until it clicks into place. 2. Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the mains socket. Use only the included packing charger. Warning • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter.
Installation 5. Disconnecting the charger Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone by pressing its side buttons as shown in the diagram. Note • Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone. • Do not remove your battery or the SIM card while charging. • The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete. Note If the battery does not charge, • switch the phone off. • ensure the battery is correctly fit.
Making and Answering Calls Making a call 1. Key in phone number including the area code. If you want to delete number, press . 2. Press to call the number. 3. Press to end the call. International Calls 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix. “+” character may replace with the international access code. 2. Enter the country code, area code, and the phone number. 3. Press . Making a call using the Phonebook 1. In standby mode, press [Names]. 2.
In call Menu The menu displayed on the handset screen during a call is different to the default main menu reached from the idle screen, and the options are described here. 1 During a call 1-1 Putting a Call on Hold When a call is made or answered, press the [Send] to place it on hold. When a call is held, press the [Send] to make it active. 1-2 Making a Second Call You can get a dial number from phonebook to make a second call. Press [Names] then select Search.
In call Menu 1-4 Answering an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press the [Send] key. The handset is also able to warn you of an incoming call while you are already in a call. A tone sounds in the earpiece, and the display will show that a second call is waiting. This feature, known as Call Waiting, is only available if your network supports it. For details of how to activate and deactivate it see Call waiting [Menu 4-3-4].
In call Menu 1-7 Switching DTMF Tones on During a Call To turn DTMF tones on during a call, for example, to allow your handset to make use of an automated switchboard, select [Options], then DTMF On. DTMF tones can be turned off the same way. 1-8 Calling up Messages and SIM Tool Kit main menu The Messages and SIM Tool kit main menu options can be reached from the in-call menu by selecting [Options]. SIM Tool Kit menu is shown only when SIM in the handset supports SIM Tool Kit service.
In call Menu 2-1 Making a Second Call You can make a second call while you are already in a call. To do this, enter the second number and press [Send]. When you get second call the first call is automatically put on hold. You can swap between calls by selecting [Options] then Swap. 2-2 Setting up a Multiparty Call You can connect a call on hold to the currently active call to form a multiparty call by selecting [Options] then Multiparty / Join all.
In call Menu 2-7 Putting a Member of a Multiparty Call on Hold To place one selected caller (whose number is currently displayed on-screen) of a multiparty call on hold, select [Options] then Multiparty / Exclude. 2-8 A Private Call in a Multiparty Call To have a private call with one caller of a multiparty call, display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen, then select [Options] and Multiparty / Private to put all the other callers on hold.
Access Codes You can use the access codes described in this section to avoid unauthorized use of your phone. The access codes (except PUK and PUK2 codes) can be changed by using [Menu 4-4-6]. PIN code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. When PIN code is set On, your phone will request the PIN code every time it is switched on.
Menu Tree 1 Messages 3 Profiles 1 Write text message 2 Write multimedia message 3 Inbox 4 Outbox 5 Drafts 6 Listen to voice mail 7 Info message 8 Templates 9 Settings 1 Vibrate only 2 Quiet 3 General 4 Loud 5 Headset 4 Settings 1 Date & Time 2 Phone settings 3 Call settings 4 Security settings 5 Network settings 6 GPRS setting 7 Reset settings 2 Call register 1 Missed calls 2 Received calls 3 Dialled calls 4 Delete recent calls 5 Call charges 6 GPRS information 5 Organiser 1 Alarm clock 2 Scheduler 3
Menu Tree 6 Camera 8 Internet 1 Take picture 1 Home 2 Take in modes 2 Bookmarks 3 My album 3 Profiles 4 Settings 4 Go to URL 5 Cache settings 6 Cookies settings 7 Security certification 7 Fun & Tools 1 Favorites 8 Reset profiles 9 Browser version 2 Games 3 Calculator 4 My folder 5 Unit converter 9 Java 6 World time 1 Applications 7 Voice recorder 2 Download 8 Memory status 3 Profiles 10 SIM Service This menu depends on SIM and the network services.
Messages [Menu 1] This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), voice mail, as well as the network’s service messages. Write text message [Menu 1-1] You can write and edit text message, checking the number of message pages. 1. Enter the Messages menu by pressing [Select]. 2. If you want to write a new message, select Write text message. 3. To make text input easier, use T9. For details, see How to Use T9 (Page 36). 4.
Messages [Menu 1] • Save Saves the message. • Font You can select Size and Style of fonts. • Colour You can select Colour of foreground and background. • Alignment You can make the message contents aligned Right, Centre or Left. • Add T9 dictionary You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when edit mode is Predictive (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC). • T9 languages Select a T9 input mode. • Exit If you press Exit while writing a message, you can end the writing message and back to the Message menu.
Messages [Menu 1] Insert • Symbol You can add special characters. • Picture You can insert the Default pictures or pictures in My folder that are available for short messages. • Sound You can insert sounds that are available for short messages. • Text templates You can use Text templates already set in the phone. • Phonebook You can add phone numbers or e-mail addresses in Phonebook. • Signature You can add your contact information to the message.
Messages [Menu 1] Options • Send You can send multimedia messages to multiple recipients, prioritise your message, and make it sent later as well. • Preview You can preview multimedia messages you wrote. • Save You can save multimedia messages in the drafts or as templates. • Add slide You can add a slide before or after current slide. • Move to slide You can move to previous or next slide. • Delete slide You can delete current slides.
Messages [Menu 1] • Add T9 dictionary You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when edit mode is Predictive (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC). • T9 languages Select a T9 input mode. • Exit You can back to the Message menu. Note • If you select the picture (15K) on writing multimedia message, loading duration will take around 15 seconds at least. Furthermore, you can't activate any key during loading time. After 15 seconds, it is available to write multimedia message.
Messages [Menu 1] How to Use T9 T9 allows you to input text quickly. In T9, you only need to press the key with the corresponding letter once. This is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. • Writing words by using T9. 1. Start writing a word by using the keys to Press each key only once for one letter. To write for instance ‘Girl’, press , , The characters that you enter appear blocked. (For G) (For r) . , . (For i) (For l) The word changes after each keystroke.
Messages [Menu 1] Alternatively : Press key and select insert symbols. Select the desired character and press Select. 2. When you have finished writing a word, check whether the word is correct. If the word is correct : Press and write the next word. If the word is not correct : Search by , (Previous and Next word). Alternatively : If there is no word you want you can add your own word. Press [Options] in the Predictive edit mode. Select Add T9 dictionary Menu. You can see the following.
Messages [Menu 1] Inbox [Menu 1-3] You will be alerted when you have received messages. They will be stored in Inbox. In Inbox, you can identify each message by icons. For detail, see the icon directive. Icon directive [ ] Multimedia message [ ] Short message [ ] SIM message [ ] Read [ ] Notified multimedia message If the phone shows ‘No space for SIM message’, you have to delete only SIM messages from Inbox.
Messages [Menu 1] Forward You can forward the selected message to another party. Return call You can call back to the sender. Delete You can delete the current message. Extract You can extract picture, sound and text. They will be saved in My folder or Phonebook. View information You can view information about received messages; Sender's address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size.
Messages [Menu 1] Icon directive [ ] Sent [ ] Failed [ ] Delivery confirmed [ ] SMS sent ❇ When you already sent the message: Forward You can forward the current message to other recipients. Delete You can delete the current message. View information You can view information about outbox messages; Recipient’s address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size. ❇ When you didn’t send the message: View You can view the messaage.
Messages [Menu 1] Drafts [Menu 1-5] You can view the messages saved as a draft. The draft messages are listed with the date and time when they were saved. Scroll through the list using up/down navigation keys. Icon directive [ ] Multimedia message [ ] Text message [ ] Delivery confirmed Each draft has the following options. Press [Options]. View You can view the selected message. Edit You can edit the selected message. Send You can send the selected message.
Messages [Menu 1] Delete all Deletes all the messages from drafts folder. Listen to voice mail [Menu 1-6] You can listen to voice mail. Info message [Menu 1-7] Info service messages are text messages delivered by the network to GSM. They provide general information such as weather reports, traffic news, taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices. Each type of information has the number; therefore, you can contact service provider as long as you have input the certain number for the information.
Messages [Menu 1] • Active list You can select Info service message numbers in the active list. If you activate an info service number, you can receive messages sent from the number. Templates [Menu 1-8] Text templates [Menu 1-8-1] You have 6 text templates. You can change the predefined templates into your favorite ones or fill the s. Multimedia templates [Menu 1-8-2] You can use the following options. • Preview You can preview multimedia messages you wrote.
Messages [Menu 1] • Remove media You can remove pictures or sounds in the slide. This option can be shown only when any media exists. • Add T9 dictionary You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when edit mode is Predictive (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC). • T9 languages Select a T9 input mode. • Exit You can back to the Message menu. Signature [Menu 1-8-3] You can make your Signature. Key in Name, Phone number, Fax number and Email.
Messages [Menu 1] • Reply via same service centre When a message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. • SMS centre If you want to send the text message, you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu. Multimedia message [Menu 1-9-2] • Priority You can send the message after setting the level of priority: Low, Normal and High.
Messages [Menu 1] - Homepage This menu allows to connect MMS centre (MMSC). - Bearer • Data • GPRS - Data settings Appears only if you select Data settings as a Bearer\service. IP address Dial number : Enter the telephone number to dial to access your WAP gateway. User ID Password Call type : Select the type of data call, Analogue or Digital (ISDN). Call speed : The speed of your data connection 9600 or 14400. Linger time: You need to enter the timeout period.
Messages [Menu 1] • Permitted types Personal : Personal message. Advertisements : Commercial message. Information : Necessary information. Voice mail centre [Menu 1-9-3] You can receive the voicemail if this feature is supported by your network service provider. When a new voicemail is arrived, the symbol will be displayed on the screen. Please check with your network service provider for details of their service in order to configure the phone accordingly. 1. Hold down key in standby mode. 2.
Messages [Menu 1] • Alert - Yes Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. - No Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages. • Languages You can select the language you want by pressing [On/Off]. Then, the info service message will be shown in the language that you selected. Push messages [Menu 1-9-5] You can set the option whether you will receive the message or not.
Call register [Menu 2] Missed calls [Menu 2-1] This menu shows recently missed numbers. You can call these numbers, save and view the date and the time. Received calls [Menu 2-2] This menu shows recently received numbers. You can call these numbers, save and view the date and the time. Dialled calls [Menu 2-3] This menu shows the latest dialled numbers up to 20. Delete recent calls [Menu 2-4] You can delete recent calls of Missed calls, Received calls, Dialled calls or All calls.
Call register [Menu 2] Call duration [Menu 2-5-1] This function allows you to view the duration of your Last Call, All Calls, Received calls and Dialled calls in hours, minutes and seconds. You can also reset the call timers. 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press for direct access or use register, then select Call charges. and to enter Call 3. Scroll to highlight Call duration and Press [Select]. The following 5 submenus: Last call, All calls, Received calls, Dialled calls and Reset all.
Call register [Menu 2] Settings [Menu 2-5-3] (SIM Dependent) • Set tariff You can set the currency type and the unit price. Contact your service providers to obtain charging unit prices. To select the currency or unit in this menu, you need the PIN2 code. Note • When all units have been used, no calls can be made except emergency calls. Depending on the SIM card, you need the PIN2 code to set a call cost limit.
Call register [Menu 2] GPRS information [Menu 2-6] You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through GPRS. In addition, you can view how much time you are online. Call duration [Menu 2-6-1] You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers. Data volumes [Menu 2-6-2] You can check the Sent, Received or All data volumes and Reset all.
Profiles [Menu 3] In this menu, you can adjust and customize the phone tones for different events and environments. 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press for direct access or use and . Vibrate only You can adjust the profile as Vibrate only if you need vibration mode. In the mode, all kinds of alert are Vibrate or Silent. Quiet You can adjust the profile as Quiet if you are in quiet place. General You can adjust the profile as General.
Profiles [Menu 3] Note • Headset and Car profiles can be activated only when Handsfree kit or Ear microphone put on the handset. However, their properties can be personalised. Activate [Menu 3-x-1] Activates the selected Profile. Personalise [Menu 3-x-2] Each has the submenus as shown below except for Vibrate only. Call alert type Allows to select alert type such as Ring, Vibrate, etc. for the incoming for adjusting environment. Ring tone Allows to set the ring tone for adjusting environment.
Profiles [Menu 3] Keypad tone Allows to select the keypad tone for adjusting environment. Effect sound volume Allows to set the effect sound volume for adjusting environment. Power on/off volume Allows to set the power on/off volume for adjusting environment Auto answer This function will be activated only when your phone is connected to the headset or handsfree kit. • Off : The phone will not answer automatically. • After 5 secs : After 5 seconds, the phone will answer automatically.
Settings [Menu 4] You can set the following menus for your convenience and preferences. 1. Press 2. Press [Menu] in standby mode. for direct access to enter Settings. Date & Time [Menu 4-1] You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set date [Menu 4-1-1] You can enter the current date. Date format [Menu 4-1-2] You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Set time [Menu 4-1-3] You can enter the current time.
Settings [Menu 4] • Myfolder You can select a picture or an animation as wallpaper. Greeting note [Menu 4-2-2] If you select On, you can edit the text which is displayed in standby mode. Language [Menu 4-2-3] You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. Backlight [Menu 4-2-4] You can set the light-up duration of the LCD display. LCD contrast [Menu 4-2-5] You can set the brightness of LCD by pressing , .
Settings [Menu 4] Call settings [Menu 4-3] You can set the menu relevant to a call by pressing the Setting menu. [Select] in Call divert [Menu 4-3-1] The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider. • All voice calls Diverts voice calls unconditionally. • If busy Diverts voice calls when the phone is in use. • If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer.
Settings [Menu 4] The submenus Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. - Activate Activate the corresponding service. To voice mail centre Forwards to message centre. This function is not shown at All data calls and All fax calls menus. To other number Inputs the number for diverting. To favourite number You can check recent 5 diverted numbers. - Cancel Deactivate the corresponding service. - View status View the status of the corresponding service.
Settings [Menu 4] Send my number [Menu 4-3-3] (network and subscription dependent) • On You can send your phone number to another party. Your phone number will be shown on the receiver’s phone. • Off Your phone number will not be shown. • Set by network Select this to reset the phone to the setting that you have agreed upon with your service provider. Call waiting [Menu 4-3-4] (network dependent) • Activate If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call.
Settings [Menu 4] Auto redial [Menu 4-3-6] • On When this function is activated, the phone will automatically try to redial in the case of failure to connect a call. • Off Your phone will not make any attempts to redial when the original call has not connected. Closed user group [Menu 4-3-7] (network dependent) Restricts usage of the phone with numbers that belong to certain user groups. When this function is used, every outgoing call is associated with a group index.
Settings [Menu 4] Security settings [Menu 4-4] PIN code request [Menu 4-4-1] In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press [Select]. 2. Set On/Off. 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. 4.
Settings [Menu 4] Note • If you want to lock your phone keypad manually, enter Top menu and press key. • If you want to unlock your phone keypad, press [unlock] key and then press key. But if you enabled Automatic key lock before, your phone keypad will be unlock and then after 10 seconds the keypad will be lock up again automatically. Call barring [Menu 4-4-4] The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password.
Settings [Menu 4] Each call barring menu has following submenus: • Activate Allows to request the network to set call restriction on. • Cancel Set the selected call restriction off. • View status View the status whether the calls are barred or not. Fixed dial number [Menu 4-4-5] (SIM dependent) You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. • Activate You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers.
Settings [Menu 4] Network settings [Menu 4-5] You can select a network which will be registered either automatically or manually. Usually, the network selection is set to Automatic. Automatic [Menu 4-5-1] If you select Automatic mode, the phone will automatically search for and select a network for you. Once you have selected “Automatic”, the phone will be set to “Automatic” even though the power is off and on. Manual [Menu 4-5-2] The phone will find the list of available networks and show you them.
Settings [Menu 4] GPRS setting [Menu 4-6] You can set GPRS service depending on various situation. Power on [Menu 4-6-1] If you select this menu, the phone is automatically registered to a GPRS network when you switch the phone on. Starting a WAP or PC dial-up application created the connection between phone and network and data transfer is possible. When you end the application, GPRS connection is ended but the registration to the GPRS network remains.
Organiser [Menu 5] Alarm clock [Menu 5-1] You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. 2. Select the repeat period : Once, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Everyday. 3. Select the alarm tone you want and press 4. Edit the alarm name and press [OK]. [OK]. Scheduler [Menu 5-2] When you enter this menu a Calendar will show up. On top of the screen there are sections for date. Also on bottom of the screen there are sections for icons (schedule, memo).
Organiser [Menu 5] Add new [Menu 5-2-1] You can edit maximum 39 characters and take up to 20 notes. • Schedule Input the subject, the schedule time, the repeat, the alarm by pressing allowed keys. • Memo 1. Select Add new by pressing [Select]. 2. Press Memo. 3. Input the memo and then press [OK]. View [Menu 5-2-2] Shows the note for the chosen day. Use , to browse through the note lists. If you set alarm for the note, Alarm watch is displayed.
Organiser [Menu 5] Phonebook [Menu 5-3] 1. To use Phonebook, press [Names] in standby mode. 2. To use Phonebook, press select Organiser. [Menu] in standby mode and Search [Menu 5-3-1] (Calling from phonebook) 1. In standby mode, press 2. Search by pressing [Names]. [Select]. 3. Enter the name whose phone numbers or e-mail address you want to search or Select ‘List’ to view phonebook. 4. Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name or number you want to search. 5.
Organiser [Menu 5] Add new [Menu 5-3-2] You can add phonebook entry by using this function. Phone memory capacity is 200 entries. SIM card memory capacity depends on the cellular service provider. You can also save 25 characters of name in The Phone memory, and save characters in the SIM card. The number of character is SIM dependent feature. 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing mode. [Names] in standby 2. Scroll to highlight Add new, and press [Select]. 3.
Organiser [Menu 5] Caller groups [Menu 5-3-3] You can list up to 20 members per one group. There are 7 groups you can make lists to. 1. In standby mode, press [Names]. 2. Scroll to Caller groups item then press Group list will be displayed. 3. Select Group name you want by pressing [Select], and every [Select]. • Member list Shows the group members you have selected. • Group ring tone Allows you to specify ring tone for the group members' call.
Organiser [Menu 5] Speed dial [Menu 5-3-4] You can assign any of the keys, to with a Name list entry. You can call directly by pressing this key for 2-3 seconds. 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing mode. 2. Scroll to Speed dial, then press [Names] in standby [Select]. 3. If you want to add Speed dial, select (Empty). Then, you can search the name in phonebook. 4. Select allocated a name by speed dial, and choose Change or Delete to edit the name.
Organiser [Menu 5] • Search by Scroll to highlight Search by, then press [Select]. - If you select Variable, the phone will ask how to search. - If you select Name or Number, the phone will search an entry by Name or Number. • View options Scroll to highlight View options, then press [Select] - Name only : Set the phonebook list with displaying only name. - With pictures : Set the phonebook list with the information of character and picture.
Organiser [Menu 5] Delete all [Menu 5-3-7] You can delete all entries in SIM, Phone, and Voice. This function requires Security code except for voice. 1. Press [Names] in standby mode and select Delete all, press [Select]. 2. Then select a memory to erase. 3. Enter security code and Press [OK] or [Back]. Information [Menu 5-3-8] • Service dial number Use this function to access a particular list of services provided by your network operator (if supported by the SIM card). 1.
Camera [Menu 6] With the B2100 phone, you can takes pictures and save them. After taking a picture, you can also send it via MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) right away. Note • If the battery is too low, you may not use the Camera feature. Take picture [Menu 6-1] Press the Menu key and select Camera ➝ Take picture using navigation keys. Or, you can directly open the camera module by a press of the Camera key in standby mode. The camera module opens and you’ll see the view to be captured.
Camera [Menu 6] 4. Tone ( ( ) ): Colour ( 5. Brightness ( 6. Timer ( 7. Memory ( )/ Sepia ( )/ Black and white ): -2, -1, 0, +1, +2 ): Off, 3 sec, 5 sec ): Shows the current memory status. Note: If the memory is full, “Memory full” message is popped up and you cannot save a picture. Create space by deleting old pictures in My album. 1. Center the desired option menu using the left/right navigation keys. 2. Select the desired value with the up/down navigation keys. 3.
Camera [Menu 6] 4. To save the image, center the “ ” and press the left soft key or the side camera key. If you don’t want to save the image, center the “ ” and press the left soft key or the side camera key. You can also send the image via multimedia message by selecting “ ”. For further information regarding multimedia message writing, refer to page 33. Take in modes [Menu 6-2] You can enjoy taking pictures in diverse preset frames. 7 preset frames are available.
Camera [Menu 6] 1. Center the desired option menu using the left/right navigation keys. 2. Select the desired value with the up/down navigation keys. 3. After finishing all the setting, focus on the subject to capture and press the side camera key or the left soft key. With a click, the image is captured and the following menu bar appears. MMS message Save Delete Note • If Auto save [Menu-6-4-1] is set to On, the captured image is automatically saved without displaying this menu bar. (Refer to page 79.
Camera [Menu 6] My album [Menu 6-3] Press the Menu key and select Camera ➝ My album using navigation keys. All the picture taken in the Take picture and Take in modes are stored in this menu. The latest taken picture comes first. The pictures are classified into General pictures and Mode pictures. And in All pictures, you can view all the pictures. With pictures, you can do the following by pressing the left soft key [Options]. • Delete: Deletes the selected pictures.
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] Favorites [Menu 7-1] You can set up to 9 menus which you have used often in Favorites. You can connect this menu directly by pressing hot key . If you want to register the menu in favorites, select on a list. If the menu is already registered, the options are displayed as follows: - Select : Activate the registered menu. - Change : Change the menu. - Delete : Delete the registered menu. - Delete all : Delete all menus which are registered in Favorites.
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] Calculator [Menu 7-3] This contains the standard functions such as +, -, x, ÷ : Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. 1. Input the numbers by pressing numeric keys. 2. Use a navigation key to select a sign for calculation. 3. Then input the numbers. 4. Press [Result] to view the result. 5. Press [Reset] or enter numbers to repeat the procedure above. 6. Use key to erase any numbers or signs. 7. If you press If you press key, you can input a minus number.
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] • Set as Wallpaper / Set as ring tone You can set downloaded sounds or pictures as wallpaper or Ring tone. • Delete You can delete each downloaded content. • Delete all You can delete all downloaded contents. Unit converter [Menu 7-5] This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 4 types that can be converted into units: Length, Area, Weight, and Volume. 1. You can select one of four unit types by pressing 2. Select the standard value by using , [Unit] key. . 3.
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] Voice recorder [Menu 7-7] The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds. Record [Menu 7-7-1] 1. You can record voice memo in Voice recorder menu and also holding down in the standby mode. 2. Once recording is started, the message “Recording” and the remaining time is displayed. 3. If you want to finish recording, press 4. Key in Voice memo title, press [Save]. [OK]. View list [Menu 7-7-2] The phone shows voice memo list.
Internet [Menu 8] The phone supports services based on Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). You can access services supported by your network. The services menu allows you to get the information such as news, weather reports, and flight times. Home [Menu 8-1] Connect to a homepage. The homepage may be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by Service Provider if you don’t make in activated profile. Bookmarks [Menu 8-2] Press to exit.
Internet [Menu 8] - Bearer You can set the bearer data service. • Data • GPRS - Data settings Appeares only if you select Data settings as a Bearer\service. IP address : Enter the IP address of the WAP gateway you want. Dial number : Enter the telephone number to dial to access your WAP gateway. User ID : The users identity for your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway). Password : The password required by your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway) to identify you.
Internet [Menu 8] - Connection type The options for connection type are Continuous, Temporary or HTTP and depend on the gateway you are using. Continuous A confirmed delivery mechanism but generates more network traffic. Temporary A non-confirmed (connectionless) service. - Proxy settings IP address : Input the IP address of the proxy. Port : Input the port number of the proxy. - DNS settings Insert the primary and secondary DNS if required by the network operator.
Internet [Menu 8] Go to URL [Menu 8-4] You can directly connect to the site you want. You need to enter a specific URL. Cache settings [Menu 8-5] You can remove the contents of Cache memory or change the Cache mode. Clear cache [Menu 8-5-1] The contents of Cache memory will be removed. Check cache [Menu 8-5-2] You can set the option whether you will check the cache memory or not. Cookies settings [Menu 8-6] The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone.
Internet [Menu 8] Reset profiles [Menu 8-8] You can reset profiles to return to original settings. Browser version [Menu 8-9] The WAP Browser version is displayed.
On browsing menu If you are on line, you can view the following menus. • Home Refer to [Menu 8-1]. • Reload Reloads the current page. • Bookmarks See [Menu 8-2]. • Save as bookmark You can save a site as bookmark. • Go to URL You can move to the site you want. In this menu, you can also edit the site address. • Clear cache The contents of cache memory will be removed.
Java [Menu 9] Applications [Menu 9-1] Java Menu Options Scroll to an application and select Options. 1. New : You can create new folder. 2. Move : You can select a folder which you want. 3. About : Shows Java MIDP information. 4. Info : Displays information about the selected MIDlet. 5. Remove : Deletes the selected MIDlet. 6. Update : Accesses the server and updates the selected MIDlet. 7. Options : Some Java applications may require a data connection to be made. Select this to set the connecting options.
Java [Menu 9] Profiles [Menu 9-3] Some Java applications may require a network connection to operate, for example, multiplayer games. You can set up to 5 profiles and activate the desired one. This is similar to wap profile setting. Refer to wap profiles when you set this. JAVA™‚ is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Battery pack Headset Allows hands-free operation. Includes earpiece and microphone. Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. Data cable/CD You can connect your phone to PC to exchange the data between them. Note • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty.
Care and Maintenance When using this unit, basic safety precautions as below should be always followed. • Do not disassemble this unit. (Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.) • Away from electrical appliance such as a TV, radio or personal computer. • The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. • Do not drop. • Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock.
Care and Maintenance Caring for the Battery • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance.
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems that you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require that you call your service provider, but most of problems you encounter are easy to correct yourself. Message SIM error Possible causes There is no SIM card in the phone or you may have inserted it incorrectly. No connection Signal weak to the network Outside GSM network Possible Corrective measures Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted.
Trouble Shooting Message Charging error Possible causes Possible Corrective measures Battery totally empty Temperature out of range Charge battery. Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Check power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts, clean them if necessary. Plug in to a different socket or check voltage. If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Only use original LG accessories. Replace battery.
Technical Data General Product name : B2100 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C Min : -10°C B2100 User Guide 97